]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/linux.git/blob - include/net/mac80211.h
Merge tag 'riscv-for-linus-5.7-rc4' of git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel...
[thirdparty/linux.git] / include / net / mac80211.h
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4 *
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
11 */
12
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25
26 /**
27 * DOC: Introduction
28 *
29 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32 * drivers.
33 */
34
35 /**
36 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37 *
38 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43 * tasklet function.
44 *
45 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47 */
48
49 /**
50 * DOC: Warning
51 *
52 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54 */
55
56 /**
57 * DOC: Frame format
58 *
59 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62 * hardware.
63 *
64 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65 *
66 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68 *
69 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71 */
72
73 /**
74 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75 *
76 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80 *
81 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82 * suspend.
83 *
84 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85 *
86 */
87
88 /**
89 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90 *
91 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93 * between different stations/interfaces.
94 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97 *
98 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99 * driver operation.
100 *
101 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104 *
105 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107 *
108 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109 * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110 * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111 *
112 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116 * ieee80211_return_txq().
117 *
118 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122 * .release_buffered_frames().
123 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126 */
127
128 struct device;
129
130 /**
131 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132 *
133 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135 */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
138 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
142
143 /**
144 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149 */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
152 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
153 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
154 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
155 };
156
157 /**
158 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159 *
160 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162 *
163 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172 */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 u16 txop;
175 u16 cw_min;
176 u16 cw_max;
177 u8 aifs;
178 bool acm;
179 bool uapsd;
180 bool mu_edca;
181 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190
191 /**
192 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199 */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
202 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
203 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
204 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
205 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
206 };
207
208 /**
209 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210 *
211 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213 *
214 * @def: the channel definition
215 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224 */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228
229 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230
231 bool radar_enabled;
232
233 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235
236 /**
237 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
241 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248 * for changes/removal.)
249 */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254
255 /**
256 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257 *
258 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
260 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261 * done.
262 *
263 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266 */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272
273 /**
274 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275 *
276 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278 *
279 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280 * also implies a change in the AID.
281 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
291 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304 * changed
305 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309 * context had been assigned.
310 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313 * keep alive) changed.
314 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
316 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
320 *
321 */
322 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
323 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
324 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
325 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
326 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
327 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
328 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
329 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
330 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
331 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
332 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
333 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
334 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
335 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
336 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
337 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
338 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
339 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
340 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
341 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
342 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
343 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
344 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
345 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
346 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
347 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
348 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
349 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
350 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
351 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
352 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29,
353
354 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
355 };
356
357 /*
358 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
359 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
360 * filtering will be disabled.
361 */
362 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
363
364 /**
365 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
366 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
367 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
368 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
369 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
370 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
371 * once each time the timeout triggers.
372 */
373 enum ieee80211_event_type {
374 RSSI_EVENT,
375 MLME_EVENT,
376 BAR_RX_EVENT,
377 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
378 };
379
380 /**
381 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
382 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
383 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
384 */
385 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
386 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
387 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
388 };
389
390 /**
391 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
392 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
393 */
394 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
395 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
396 };
397
398 /**
399 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
400 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
401 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
402 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
403 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
404 */
405 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
406 AUTH_EVENT,
407 ASSOC_EVENT,
408 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
409 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
410 };
411
412 /**
413 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
414 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
415 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
416 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
417 */
418 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
419 MLME_SUCCESS,
420 MLME_DENIED,
421 MLME_TIMEOUT,
422 };
423
424 /**
425 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
426 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
427 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
428 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
429 */
430 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
431 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
432 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
433 u16 reason;
434 };
435
436 /**
437 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
438 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
439 * @tid: the tid
440 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
441 */
442 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
443 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
444 u16 tid;
445 u16 ssn;
446 };
447
448 /**
449 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
450 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
451 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
452 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
453 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
454 * @u:union holding the fields above
455 */
456 struct ieee80211_event {
457 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
458 union {
459 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
460 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
461 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
462 } u;
463 };
464
465 /**
466 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
467 *
468 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
469 *
470 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
471 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
472 */
473 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
474 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
475 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
476 };
477
478 /**
479 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
480 *
481 * @lci: LCI subelement content
482 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
483 * @lci_len: LCI data length
484 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
485 */
486 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
487 const u8 *lci;
488 const u8 *civicloc;
489 size_t lci_len;
490 size_t civicloc_len;
491 };
492
493 /**
494 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
495 *
496 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
497 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
498 *
499 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
500 * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
501 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
502 * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
503 * ACK, BACK or both
504 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
505 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
506 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
507 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
508 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
509 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
510 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
511 * @assoc: association status
512 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
513 * or not
514 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
515 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
516 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
517 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
518 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
519 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
520 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
521 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
522 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
523 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
524 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
525 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
526 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
527 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
528 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
529 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
530 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
531 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
532 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
533 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
534 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
535 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
536 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
537 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
538 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
539 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
540 * the current band.
541 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
542 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
543 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
544 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
545 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
546 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
547 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
548 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
549 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
550 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
551 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
552 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
553 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
554 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
555 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
556 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
557 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
558 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
559 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
560 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
561 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
562 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
563 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
564 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
565 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
566 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
567 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
568 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
569 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
570 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
571 * your driver/device needs to do.
572 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
573 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
574 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
575 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
576 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
577 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured.
578 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
579 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
580 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
581 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
582 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
583 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
584 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
585 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
586 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
587 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
588 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
589 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
590 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
591 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
592 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
593 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
594 * station.
595 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
596 * responder functionality.
597 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
598 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
599 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
600 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
601 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
602 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
603 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
604 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
605 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
606 * @he_operation: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
607 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
608 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
609 */
610 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
611 const u8 *bssid;
612 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
613 bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
614 bool uora_exists;
615 bool ack_enabled;
616 u8 uora_ocw_range;
617 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
618 bool he_support;
619 bool twt_requester;
620 bool twt_responder;
621 /* association related data */
622 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
623 bool ibss_creator;
624 u16 aid;
625 /* erp related data */
626 bool use_cts_prot;
627 bool use_short_preamble;
628 bool use_short_slot;
629 bool enable_beacon;
630 u8 dtim_period;
631 u16 beacon_int;
632 u16 assoc_capability;
633 u64 sync_tsf;
634 u32 sync_device_ts;
635 u8 sync_dtim_count;
636 u32 basic_rates;
637 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
638 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
639 u16 ht_operation_mode;
640 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
641 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
642 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
643 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
644 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
645 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
646 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
647 int arp_addr_cnt;
648 bool qos;
649 bool idle;
650 bool ps;
651 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
652 size_t ssid_len;
653 bool hidden_ssid;
654 int txpower;
655 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
656 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
657 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
658 u16 max_idle_period;
659 bool protected_keep_alive;
660 bool ftm_responder;
661 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
662 /* Multiple BSSID data */
663 bool nontransmitted;
664 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
665 u8 bssid_index;
666 u8 bssid_indicator;
667 bool ema_ap;
668 u8 profile_periodicity;
669 struct ieee80211_he_operation he_operation;
670 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
671 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
672 };
673
674 /**
675 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
676 *
677 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
678 *
679 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
680 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
681 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
682 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
683 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
684 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
685 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
686 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
687 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
688 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
689 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
690 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
691 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
692 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
693 * station
694 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
695 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
696 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
697 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
698 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
699 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
700 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
701 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
702 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
703 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
704 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
705 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
706 * hardware queue.
707 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
708 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
709 * is for the whole aggregation.
710 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
711 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
712 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
713 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
714 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
715 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
716 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
717 * off-channel operation.
718 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
719 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
720 * it can be sent out.
721 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
722 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
723 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
724 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
725 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
726 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
727 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
728 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
729 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
730 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
731 * queue gets full.
732 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
733 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
734 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
735 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
736 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
737 * should kick the MLME state machine.
738 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
739 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
740 * status to user space)
741 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
742 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
743 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
744 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
745 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
746 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
747 * handled properly by the device.
748 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
749 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
750 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
751 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
752 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
753 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
754 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
755 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
756 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
757 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
758 * PS-Poll responses.
759 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
760 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
761 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
762 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
763 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
764 * monitor injection).
765 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
766 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
767 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
768 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
769 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
770 *
771 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
772 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
773 */
774 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
775 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
776 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
777 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
778 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
779 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
780 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
781 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
782 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
783 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
784 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
785 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
786 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
787 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
788 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
789 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
790 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
791 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
792 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
793 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
794 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
795 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
796 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
797 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
798 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
799 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
800 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
801 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
802 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
803 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
804 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
805 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
806 };
807
808 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
809
810 /**
811 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
812 *
813 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
814 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
815 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
816 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
817 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
818 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
819 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
820 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
821 *
822 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
823 */
824 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
825 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
826 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
827 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
828 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
829 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
830 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
831 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(6),
832 };
833
834 /*
835 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
836 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
837 */
838 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
839 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
840 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
841 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
842 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
843 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
844 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
845 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
846
847 /**
848 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
849 * Rate Control algorithm.
850 *
851 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
852 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
853 *
854 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
855 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
856 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
857 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
858 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
859 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
860 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
861 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
862 * Greenfield mode.
863 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
864 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
865 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
866 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
867 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
868 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
869 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
870 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
871 */
872 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
873 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
874 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
875 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
876
877 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
878 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
879 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
880 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
881 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
882 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
883 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
884 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
885 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
886 };
887
888
889 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
890 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
891
892 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
893 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
894
895 /* maximum number of rate stages */
896 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
897
898 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
899 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
900
901 /**
902 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
903 *
904 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
905 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
906 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
907 *
908 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
909 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
910 *
911 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
912 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
913 *
914 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
915 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
916 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
917 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
918 * information::
919 *
920 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
921 *
922 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
923 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
924 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
925 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
926 * information should then contain::
927 *
928 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
929 *
930 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
931 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
932 */
933 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
934 s8 idx;
935 u16 count:5,
936 flags:11;
937 } __packed;
938
939 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
940
941 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
942 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
943 {
944 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
945 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
946 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
947 }
948
949 static inline u8
950 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
951 {
952 return rate->idx & 0xF;
953 }
954
955 static inline u8
956 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
957 {
958 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
959 }
960
961 /**
962 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
963 *
964 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
965 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
966 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
967 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
968 *
969 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
970 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
971 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
972 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
973 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
974 * @control: union part for control data
975 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
976 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
977 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
978 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
979 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
980 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
981 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
982 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
983 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
984 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
985 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
986 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
987 * @pad: padding
988 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
989 * @status: union part for status data
990 * @status.rates: attempted rates
991 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
992 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
993 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
994 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
995 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
996 * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
997 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
998 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
999 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1000 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1001 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
1002 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1003 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1004 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1005 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1006 */
1007 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1008 /* common information */
1009 u32 flags;
1010 u32 band:3,
1011 ack_frame_id:13,
1012 hw_queue:4,
1013 tx_time_est:10;
1014 /* 2 free bits */
1015
1016 union {
1017 struct {
1018 union {
1019 /* rate control */
1020 struct {
1021 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1022 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1023 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1024 u8 use_rts:1;
1025 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1026 u8 short_preamble:1;
1027 u8 skip_table:1;
1028 /* 2 bytes free */
1029 };
1030 /* only needed before rate control */
1031 unsigned long jiffies;
1032 };
1033 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1034 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1035 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1036 u32 flags;
1037 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1038 } control;
1039 struct {
1040 u64 cookie;
1041 } ack;
1042 struct {
1043 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1044 s32 ack_signal;
1045 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1046 u8 ampdu_len;
1047 u8 antenna;
1048 u16 tx_time;
1049 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1050 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1051 } status;
1052 struct {
1053 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1054 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1055 u8 pad[4];
1056
1057 void *rate_driver_data[
1058 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1059 };
1060 void *driver_data[
1061 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1062 };
1063 };
1064
1065 static inline u16
1066 ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1067 {
1068 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1069 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1070 */
1071 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1072 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1073 }
1074
1075 static inline u16
1076 ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1077 {
1078 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1079 }
1080
1081 /**
1082 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1083 *
1084 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1085 * @info: Basic tx status information
1086 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1087 * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1088 */
1089 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1090 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1091 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1092 struct sk_buff *skb;
1093 struct rate_info *rate;
1094 };
1095
1096 /**
1097 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1098 *
1099 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1100 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1101 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1102 *
1103 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1104 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1105 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1106 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1107 */
1108 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1109 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1110 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1111 const u8 *common_ies;
1112 size_t common_ie_len;
1113 };
1114
1115
1116 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1117 {
1118 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1119 }
1120
1121 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1122 {
1123 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1124 }
1125
1126 /**
1127 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1128 *
1129 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1130 *
1131 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1132 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1133 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1134 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1135 *
1136 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1137 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1138 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1139 */
1140 static inline void
1141 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1142 {
1143 int i;
1144
1145 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1146 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1147 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1148 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1149 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1150 /* clear the rate counts */
1151 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1152 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1153
1154 BUILD_BUG_ON(
1155 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1156 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1157 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1158 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1159 }
1160
1161
1162 /**
1163 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1164 *
1165 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1166 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1167 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1168 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1169 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1170 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1171 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1172 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1173 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1174 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1175 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1176 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1177 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1178 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1179 * de-duplication by itself.
1180 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1181 * the frame.
1182 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1183 * the frame.
1184 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1185 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1186 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1187 * merging.
1188 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1189 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1190 * (including FCS) was received.
1191 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1192 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1193 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1194 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1195 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1196 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1197 * each A-MPDU
1198 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1199 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1200 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1201 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1202 * on this subframe
1203 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1204 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1205 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1206 * done by the hardware
1207 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1208 * processing it in any regular way.
1209 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1210 * them for sniffing purposes.
1211 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1212 * monitor interfaces.
1213 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1214 * them for sniffing purposes.
1215 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1216 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1217 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1218 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1219 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1220 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1221 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1222 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1223 * interleaved with other frames.
1224 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1225 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1226 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1227 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1228 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1229 * the first subframe.
1230 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1231 * be done in the hardware.
1232 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1233 * frame
1234 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1235 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1236 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1237 *
1238 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1239 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1240 * - DATA3_CODING
1241 * - DATA5_GI
1242 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1243 * - DATA6_NSTS
1244 * - DATA3_STBC
1245 *
1246 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1247 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1248 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1249 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1250 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1251 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1252 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1253 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1254 */
1255 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1256 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1257 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1258 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1259 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1260 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1261 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1262 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1263 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1264 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1265 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1266 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1267 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1268 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1269 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1270 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1271 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1272 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1273 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1274 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1275 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1276 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1277 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1278 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1279 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1280 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1281 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1282 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1283 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1284 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1285 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1286 };
1287
1288 /**
1289 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1290 *
1291 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1292 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1293 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1294 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1295 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1296 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1297 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1298 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1299 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1300 */
1301 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1302 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1303 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1304 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1305 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1306 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1307 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1308 };
1309
1310 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1311
1312 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1313 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1314 RX_ENC_HT,
1315 RX_ENC_VHT,
1316 RX_ENC_HE,
1317 };
1318
1319 /**
1320 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1321 *
1322 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1323 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1324 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1325 *
1326 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1327 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1328 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1329 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1330 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1331 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1332 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1333 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1334 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1335 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1336 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1337 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1338 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1339 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1340 * values were filled.
1341 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1342 * support dB or unspecified units)
1343 * @antenna: antenna used
1344 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1345 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1346 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1347 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1348 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1349 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1350 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1351 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1352 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1353 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1354 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1355 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1356 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1357 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1358 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1359 */
1360 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1361 u64 mactime;
1362 u64 boottime_ns;
1363 u32 device_timestamp;
1364 u32 ampdu_reference;
1365 u32 flag;
1366 u16 freq;
1367 u8 enc_flags;
1368 u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1369 u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1370 u8 rate_idx;
1371 u8 nss;
1372 u8 rx_flags;
1373 u8 band;
1374 u8 antenna;
1375 s8 signal;
1376 u8 chains;
1377 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1378 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1379 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1380 };
1381
1382 /**
1383 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1384 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1385 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1386 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1387 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1388 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1389 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1390 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1391 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1392 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1393 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1394 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1395 * @data field.
1396 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1397 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1398 * length
1399 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1400 *
1401 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1402 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1403 * data.
1404 */
1405 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1406 u32 present;
1407 u8 align;
1408 u8 oui[3];
1409 u8 subns;
1410 u8 pad;
1411 u16 len;
1412 u8 data[];
1413 } __packed;
1414
1415 /**
1416 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1417 *
1418 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1419 *
1420 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1421 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1422 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1423 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1424 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1425 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1426 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1427 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1428 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1429 * for more.
1430 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1431 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1432 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1433 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1434 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1435 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1436 * operating channel.
1437 */
1438 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1439 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1440 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1441 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1442 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1443 };
1444
1445
1446 /**
1447 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1448 *
1449 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1450 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1451 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1452 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1453 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1454 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1455 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1456 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1457 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1458 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1459 */
1460 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1461 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1462 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1463 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1464 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1465 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1466 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1467 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1468 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1469 };
1470
1471 /**
1472 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1473 *
1474 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1475 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1476 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1477 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1478 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1479 */
1480 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1481 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1482 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1483 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1484 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1485
1486 /* keep last */
1487 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1488 };
1489
1490 /**
1491 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1492 *
1493 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1494 *
1495 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1496 *
1497 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1498 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1499 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1500 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1501 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1502 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1503 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1504 *
1505 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1506 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1507 *
1508 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1509 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1510 *
1511 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1512 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1513 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1514 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1515 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1516 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1517 *
1518 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1519 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1520 * configured for an HT channel.
1521 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1522 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1523 */
1524 struct ieee80211_conf {
1525 u32 flags;
1526 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1527
1528 u16 listen_interval;
1529 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1530
1531 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1532
1533 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1534 bool radar_enabled;
1535 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1536 };
1537
1538 /**
1539 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1540 *
1541 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1542 * operation.
1543 *
1544 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1545 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1546 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1547 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1548 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1549 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1550 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1551 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1552 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1553 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1554 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1555 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1556 * channel, expressed in TU.
1557 */
1558 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1559 u64 timestamp;
1560 u32 device_timestamp;
1561 bool block_tx;
1562 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1563 u8 count;
1564 u32 delay;
1565 };
1566
1567 /**
1568 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1569 *
1570 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1571 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1572 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1573 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1574 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1575 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1576 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1577 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1578 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1579 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1580 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1581 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1582 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1583 */
1584 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1585 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1586 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1587 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1588 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1589 };
1590
1591 /**
1592 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1593 *
1594 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1595 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1596 *
1597 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1598 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1599 * or the BSS we're associated to
1600 * @addr: address of this interface
1601 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1602 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1603 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1604 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1605 * for read access.
1606 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1607 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1608 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1609 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1610 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1611 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1612 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1613 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1614 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1615 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1616 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1617 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1618 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1619 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1620 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1621 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1622 * interface.
1623 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1624 * sizeof(void \*).
1625 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1626 * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1627 * protected by fq->lock.
1628 */
1629 struct ieee80211_vif {
1630 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1631 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1632 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1633 bool p2p;
1634 bool csa_active;
1635 bool mu_mimo_owner;
1636
1637 u8 cab_queue;
1638 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1639
1640 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1641
1642 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1643
1644 u32 driver_flags;
1645
1646 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1647 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1648 #endif
1649
1650 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1651
1652 bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1653
1654 /* must be last */
1655 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1656 };
1657
1658 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1659 {
1660 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1661 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1662 #endif
1663 return false;
1664 }
1665
1666 /**
1667 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1668 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1669 *
1670 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1671 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1672 *
1673 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1674 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1675 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1676 */
1677 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1678
1679 /**
1680 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1681 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1682 *
1683 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1684 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1685 *
1686 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1687 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1688 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1689 */
1690 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1691
1692 /**
1693 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1694 *
1695 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1696 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1697 *
1698 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1699 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1700 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1701 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1702 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1703 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1704 * generation in software.
1705 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1706 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1707 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1708 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1709 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1710 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1711 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1712 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1713 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1714 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1715 * MIC.
1716 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1717 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1718 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1719 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1720 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1721 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1722 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1723 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1724 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1725 * only for management frames (MFP).
1726 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1727 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1728 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1729 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1730 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1731 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1732 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1733 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1734 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1735 * generation only
1736 */
1737 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1738 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1739 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1740 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1741 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1742 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1743 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1744 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1745 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1746 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
1747 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
1748 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
1749 };
1750
1751 /**
1752 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1753 *
1754 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1755 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1756 *
1757 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1758 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1759 * encrypted in hardware.
1760 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1761 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1762 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1763 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1764 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1765 * @keylen: key material length
1766 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1767 * data block:
1768 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1769 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1770 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1771 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1772 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1773 */
1774 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1775 atomic64_t tx_pn;
1776 u32 cipher;
1777 u8 icv_len;
1778 u8 iv_len;
1779 u8 hw_key_idx;
1780 s8 keyidx;
1781 u16 flags;
1782 u8 keylen;
1783 u8 key[0];
1784 };
1785
1786 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1787
1788 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1789 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1790
1791 /**
1792 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1793 *
1794 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1795 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1796 * reverse order than in packet)
1797 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1798 * reverse order than in packet)
1799 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1800 * reverse order than in packet)
1801 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1802 * reverse order than in packet)
1803 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1804 */
1805 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1806 union {
1807 struct {
1808 u32 iv32;
1809 u16 iv16;
1810 } tkip;
1811 struct {
1812 u8 pn[6];
1813 } ccmp;
1814 struct {
1815 u8 pn[6];
1816 } aes_cmac;
1817 struct {
1818 u8 pn[6];
1819 } aes_gmac;
1820 struct {
1821 u8 pn[6];
1822 } gcmp;
1823 struct {
1824 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1825 u8 seq_len;
1826 } hw;
1827 };
1828 };
1829
1830 /**
1831 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1832 *
1833 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1834 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1835 *
1836 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1837 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1838 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1839 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1840 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1841 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1842 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1843 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1844 * key_idx value calculation:
1845 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1846 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1847 */
1848 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1849 u32 cipher;
1850 u16 iftype;
1851 u8 hdr_len;
1852 u8 pn_len;
1853 u8 pn_off;
1854 u8 key_idx_off;
1855 u8 key_idx_mask;
1856 u8 key_idx_shift;
1857 u8 mic_len;
1858 };
1859
1860 /**
1861 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1862 *
1863 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1864 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1865 *
1866 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1867 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1868 */
1869 enum set_key_cmd {
1870 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1871 };
1872
1873 /**
1874 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1875 *
1876 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1877 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1878 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1879 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1880 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1881 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1882 */
1883 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1884 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1885 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1886 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1887 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1888 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1889 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1890 };
1891
1892 /**
1893 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1894 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1895 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1896 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1897 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1898 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1899 *
1900 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1901 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1902 */
1903 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1904 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1905 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1906 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1907 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1908 };
1909
1910 /**
1911 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1912 *
1913 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1914 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1915 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1916 */
1917 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1918 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1919 struct {
1920 s8 idx;
1921 u8 count;
1922 u8 count_cts;
1923 u8 count_rts;
1924 u16 flags;
1925 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1926 };
1927
1928 /**
1929 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1930 *
1931 * Used to configure txpower for station.
1932 *
1933 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1934 * to the STA.
1935 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1936 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1937 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1938 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1939 * per peer TPC.
1940 */
1941 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1942 s16 power;
1943 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1944 };
1945
1946 /**
1947 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1948 *
1949 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1950 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1951 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1952 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1953 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1954 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1955 *
1956 * @addr: MAC address
1957 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1958 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1959 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1960 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1961 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1962 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1963 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1964 * Can be modified by driver.
1965 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1966 * otherwise always false)
1967 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1968 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1969 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1970 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1971 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1972 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1973 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1974 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1975 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1976 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1977 * the station moves to associated state.
1978 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1979 * @rates: rate control selection table
1980 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1981 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1982 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1983 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1984 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1985 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1986 * unlimited.
1987 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1988 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1989 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1990 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
1991 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1992 * the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1993 */
1994 struct ieee80211_sta {
1995 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1996 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1997 u16 aid;
1998 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1999 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2000 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2001 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2002 bool wme;
2003 u8 uapsd_queues;
2004 u8 max_sp;
2005 u8 rx_nss;
2006 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2007 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2008 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2009 bool tdls;
2010 bool tdls_initiator;
2011 bool mfp;
2012 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2013
2014 /**
2015 * @max_amsdu_len:
2016 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2017 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2018 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2019 *
2020 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2021 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2022 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2023 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2024 *
2025 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2026 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2027 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2028 */
2029 u16 max_amsdu_len;
2030 bool support_p2p_ps;
2031 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2032 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2033 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2034
2035 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2036
2037 /* must be last */
2038 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2039 };
2040
2041 /**
2042 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2043 *
2044 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2045 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2046 *
2047 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2048 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2049 */
2050 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2051 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2052 };
2053
2054 /**
2055 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2056 *
2057 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2058 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2059 */
2060 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2061 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2062 };
2063
2064 /**
2065 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2066 *
2067 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2068 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2069 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2070 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2071 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2072 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2073 *
2074 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2075 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2076 */
2077 struct ieee80211_txq {
2078 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2079 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2080 u8 tid;
2081 u8 ac;
2082
2083 /* must be last */
2084 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2085 };
2086
2087 /**
2088 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2089 *
2090 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2091 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2092 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2093 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2094 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2095 *
2096 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2097 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2098 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2099 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2100 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2101 * algorithm.
2102 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2103 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2104 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2105 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2106 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2107 * CCK frames.
2108 *
2109 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2110 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2111 * the FCS at the end.
2112 *
2113 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2114 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2115 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2116 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2117 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2118 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2119 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2120 *
2121 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2122 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2123 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2124 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2125 *
2126 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2127 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2128 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2129 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2130 *
2131 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2132 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2133 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2134 *
2135 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2136 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2137 *
2138 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2139 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2140 *
2141 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2142 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2143 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2144 *
2145 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2146 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2147 *
2148 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2149 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2150 *
2151 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2152 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2153 * the stack.
2154 *
2155 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2156 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2157 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2158 *
2159 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2160 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2161 * dtim_period).
2162 *
2163 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2164 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2165 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2166 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2167 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2168 * only in that case.
2169 *
2170 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2171 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2172 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2173 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2174 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2175 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2176 *
2177 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2178 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2179 * software.
2180 *
2181 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2182 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2183 * active interfaces.
2184 *
2185 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2186 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2187 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2188 *
2189 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2190 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2191 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2192 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2193 * supported cipher suites.
2194 *
2195 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2196 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2197 * for frames.
2198 *
2199 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2200 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2201 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2202 * control for more details.
2203 *
2204 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2205 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2206 *
2207 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2208 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2209 * is supported.
2210 *
2211 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2212 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2213 *
2214 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2215 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2216 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2217 *
2218 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2219 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2220 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2221 * CSA frame.
2222 *
2223 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2224 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2225 *
2226 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2227 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2228 *
2229 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2230 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2231 *
2232 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2233 * within A-MPDU.
2234 *
2235 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2236 * for sent beacons.
2237 *
2238 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2239 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2240 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2241 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2242 *
2243 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2244 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2245 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2246 * timeout.
2247 *
2248 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2249 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2250 *
2251 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2252 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2253 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2254 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2255 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2256 *
2257 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2258 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2259 *
2260 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2261 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2262 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2263 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2264 *
2265 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2266 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2267 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2268 *
2269 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2270 * TDLS links.
2271 *
2272 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2273 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2274 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2275 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2276 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2277 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2278 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2279 *
2280 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2281 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2282 *
2283 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2284 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2285 *
2286 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2287 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2288 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2289 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2290 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2291 *
2292 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2293 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2294 * TXQs to start with.
2295 *
2296 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2297 * length in tx status information
2298 *
2299 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2300 *
2301 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2302 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2303 *
2304 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2305 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2306 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2307 *
2308 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2309 */
2310 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2311 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2312 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2313 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2314 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2315 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2316 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2317 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2318 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2319 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2320 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2321 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2322 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2323 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2324 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2325 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2326 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2327 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2328 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2329 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2330 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2331 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2332 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2333 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2334 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2335 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2336 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2337 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2338 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2339 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2340 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2341 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2342 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2343 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2344 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2345 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2346 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2347 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2348 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2349 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2350 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2351 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2352 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2353 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2354 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2355 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2356 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2357 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2358 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2359 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2360
2361 /* keep last, obviously */
2362 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2363 };
2364
2365 /**
2366 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2367 *
2368 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2369 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2370 *
2371 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2372 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2373 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2374 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2375 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2376 *
2377 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2378 *
2379 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2380 * along with this structure.
2381 *
2382 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2383 *
2384 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2385 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2386 *
2387 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2388 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2389 *
2390 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2391 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2392 *
2393 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2394 * that HW supports
2395 *
2396 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2397 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2398 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2399 *
2400 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2401 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2402 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2403 *
2404 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2405 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2406 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2407 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2408 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2409 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2410 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2411 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2412 *
2413 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2414 * can handle.
2415 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2416 * the hw can report back.
2417 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2418 *
2419 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2420 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2421 * aggregation.
2422 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2423 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2424 * it shouldn't be set.
2425 *
2426 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2427 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2428 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2429 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2430 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2431 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2432 *
2433 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2434 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2435 *
2436 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2437 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2438 *
2439 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2440 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2441 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2442 * adding _BW is supported today.
2443 *
2444 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2445 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2446 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2447 *
2448 * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2449 *
2450 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2451 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2452 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2453 * device_timestamp.
2454 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2455 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2456 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2457 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2458 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2459 *
2460 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2461 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2462 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2463 *
2464 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2465 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2466 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2467 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2468 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2469 * neither enabled.
2470 *
2471 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2472 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2473 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2474 *
2475 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2476 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2477 * supported by HW.
2478 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2479 * device.
2480 *
2481 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2482 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2483 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2484 *
2485 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2486 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2487 *
2488 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2489 */
2490 struct ieee80211_hw {
2491 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2492 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2493 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2494 void *priv;
2495 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2496 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2497 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2498 int vif_data_size;
2499 int sta_data_size;
2500 int chanctx_data_size;
2501 int txq_data_size;
2502 u16 queues;
2503 u16 max_listen_interval;
2504 s8 max_signal;
2505 u8 max_rates;
2506 u8 max_report_rates;
2507 u8 max_rate_tries;
2508 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2509 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2510 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2511 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2512 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2513 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2514 struct {
2515 int units_pos;
2516 s16 accuracy;
2517 } radiotap_timestamp;
2518 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2519 u8 uapsd_queues;
2520 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2521 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2522 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2523 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2524 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2525 u8 weight_multiplier;
2526 u32 max_mtu;
2527 };
2528
2529 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2530 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2531 {
2532 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2533 }
2534 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2535
2536 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2537 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2538 {
2539 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2540 }
2541 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2542
2543 /**
2544 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2545 *
2546 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2547 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2548 */
2549 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2550 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2551
2552 /* Keep last */
2553 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2554 };
2555
2556 /**
2557 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2558 *
2559 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2560 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2561 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2562 * @status: channel-switch response status
2563 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2564 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2565 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2566 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2567 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2568 */
2569 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2570 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2571 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2572 u8 action_code;
2573 u32 status;
2574 u32 timestamp;
2575 u16 switch_time;
2576 u16 switch_timeout;
2577 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2578 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2579 };
2580
2581 /**
2582 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2583 *
2584 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2585 *
2586 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2587 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2588 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2589 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2590 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2591 *
2592 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2593 */
2594 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2595
2596 /**
2597 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2598 *
2599 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2600 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2601 */
2602 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2603 {
2604 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2605 }
2606
2607 /**
2608 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2609 *
2610 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2611 * @addr: the address to set
2612 */
2613 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2614 {
2615 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2616 }
2617
2618 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2619 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2620 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2621 {
2622 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2623 return NULL;
2624 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2625 }
2626
2627 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2628 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2629 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2630 {
2631 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2632 return NULL;
2633 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2634 }
2635
2636 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2637 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2638 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2639 {
2640 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2641 return NULL;
2642 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2643 }
2644
2645 /**
2646 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2647 * @hw: the hardware
2648 * @skb: the skb
2649 *
2650 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
2651 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2652 */
2653 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2654
2655 /**
2656 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2657 *
2658 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2659 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2660 *
2661 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2662 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2663 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2664 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2665 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2666 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2667 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2668 *
2669 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2670 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2671 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2672 *
2673 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2674 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2675 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2676 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2677 *
2678 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2679 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2680 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2681 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2682 *
2683 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2684 *
2685 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2686 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2687 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2688 * based on the receive flags.
2689 *
2690 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2691 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2692 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2693 * keys.
2694 *
2695 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2696 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2697 * handler.
2698 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2699 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2700 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2701 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2702 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2703 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2704 *
2705 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2706 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2707 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2708 *
2709 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2710 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2711 * requirements:
2712 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2713 mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2714 completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2715 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2716 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2717 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2718 encrypted with the new key and
2719 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2720 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2721 */
2722
2723 /**
2724 * DOC: Powersave support
2725 *
2726 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2727 *
2728 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2729 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2730 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2731 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2732 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2733 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2734 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2735 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2736 *
2737 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2738 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2739 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2740 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2741 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2742 *
2743 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2744 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2745 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2746 *
2747 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2748 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2749 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2750 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2751 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2752 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2753 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2754 *
2755 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2756 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2757 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2758 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2759 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2760 * periods.
2761 *
2762 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2763 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2764 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2765 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2766 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2767 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2768 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2769 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2770 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2771 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2772 *
2773 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2774 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2775 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2776 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2777 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2778 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2779 *
2780 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2781 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2782 */
2783
2784 /**
2785 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2786 *
2787 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2788 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2789 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2790 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2791 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2792 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2793 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2794 *
2795 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2796 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2797 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2798 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2799 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2800 *
2801 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2802 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2803 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2804 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2805 *
2806 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2807 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2808 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2809 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2810 *
2811 * - a list of information element IDs
2812 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2813 *
2814 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2815 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2816 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2817 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2818 * vendor information elements.
2819 *
2820 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2821 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2822 *
2823 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2824 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2825 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2826 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2827 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2828 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2829 *
2830 *
2831 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2832 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2833 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2834 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2835 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2836 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2837 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2838 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2839 *
2840 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2841 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2842 * signal strength threshold checking.
2843 */
2844
2845 /**
2846 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2847 *
2848 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2849 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2850 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2851 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2852 *
2853 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2854 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2855 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2856 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2857 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2858 * hardware flags.
2859 *
2860 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2861 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2862 * turned off otherwise.
2863 *
2864 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2865 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2866 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2867 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2868 */
2869
2870 /**
2871 * DOC: Frame filtering
2872 *
2873 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2874 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2875 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2876 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2877 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2878 *
2879 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2880 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2881 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2882 *
2883 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2884 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2885 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2886 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2887 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2888 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2889 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2890 *
2891 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2892 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2893 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2894 * or dropped.
2895 *
2896 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2897 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2898 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2899 * the flag, but not clear it.
2900 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2901 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2902 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2903 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2904 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2905 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2906 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2907 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2908 */
2909
2910 /**
2911 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2912 *
2913 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2914 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2915 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2916 *
2917 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2918 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2919 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2920 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2921 * the driver code.
2922 *
2923 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2924 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2925 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2926 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2927 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2928 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2929 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2930 *
2931 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2932 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2933 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2934 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2935 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2936 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2937 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2938 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2939 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2940 * @sta_notify callback.
2941 *
2942 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2943 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2944 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2945 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2946 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2947 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2948 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2949 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2950 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2951 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2952 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2953 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2954 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2955 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2956 *
2957 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2958 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2959 *
2960 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2961 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2962 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2963 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2964 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2965 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2966 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2967 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2968 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2969 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2970 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2971 *
2972 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2973 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2974 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2975 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2976 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2977 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2978 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2979 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2980 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2981 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2982 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2983 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2984 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2985 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2986 *
2987 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2988 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2989 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2990 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2991 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2992 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2993 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2994 *
2995 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2996 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2997 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2998 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2999 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3000 *
3001 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3002 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3003 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3004 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3005 */
3006
3007 /**
3008 * DOC: HW queue control
3009 *
3010 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3011 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3012 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3013 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3014 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3015 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3016 *
3017 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3018 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3019 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3020 *
3021 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3022 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3023 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3024 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3025 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3026 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3027 * the hardware queue.
3028 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3029 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3030 *
3031 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3032 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3033 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3034 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3035 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3036 *
3037 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3038 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3039 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3040 * off-channel queue: 9
3041 *
3042 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3043 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3044 *
3045 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3046 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3047 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3048 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3049 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3050 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3051 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3052 *
3053 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3054 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3055 *
3056 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3057 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3058 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3059 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3060 */
3061
3062 /**
3063 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3064 *
3065 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3066 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3067 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3068 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3069 *
3070 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3071 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3072 * multicast address.
3073 *
3074 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3075 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3076 *
3077 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3078 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3079 *
3080 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3081 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3082 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3083 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3084 * honour this flag if possible.
3085 *
3086 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3087 * station
3088 *
3089 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3090 *
3091 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3092 *
3093 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3094 */
3095 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3096 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3097 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
3098 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3099 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3100 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
3101 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3102 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
3103 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3104 };
3105
3106 /**
3107 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3108 *
3109 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3110 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3111 *
3112 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3113 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3114 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3115 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3116 *
3117 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3118 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3119 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3120 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or return the special
3121 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3122 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3123 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3124 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3125 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3126 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3127 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3128 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3129 * session is gone and removes the station.
3130 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3131 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3132 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3133 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3134 */
3135 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3136 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3137 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3138 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3139 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3140 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3141 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3142 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3143 };
3144
3145 #define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3146
3147 /**
3148 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3149 *
3150 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3151 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3152 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3153 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3154 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3155 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3156 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3157 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3158 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3159 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3160 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3161 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3162 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3163 */
3164 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3165 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3166 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3167 u16 tid;
3168 u16 ssn;
3169 u16 buf_size;
3170 bool amsdu;
3171 u16 timeout;
3172 };
3173
3174 /**
3175 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3176 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3177 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3178 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3179 */
3180 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3181 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3182 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3183 };
3184
3185 /**
3186 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3187 *
3188 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3189 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3190 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3191 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3192 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3193 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3194 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3195 * the peer.
3196 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3197 * by the peer
3198 */
3199 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3200 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3201 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3202 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3203 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3204 };
3205
3206 /**
3207 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3208 *
3209 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3210 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3211 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3212 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3213 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3214 *
3215 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3216 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3217 * for sending management frames offchannel.
3218 */
3219 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3220 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3221 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3222 };
3223
3224 /**
3225 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3226 *
3227 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3228 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3229 *
3230 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3231 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3232 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3233 * of wowlan configuration)
3234 */
3235 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3236 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3237 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3238 };
3239
3240 /**
3241 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3242 *
3243 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3244 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3245 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3246 *
3247 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3248 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3249 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3250 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3251 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3252 * Must be atomic.
3253 *
3254 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3255 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3256 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3257 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3258 * or zero.
3259 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3260 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3261 * is added.
3262 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3263 *
3264 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3265 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3266 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3267 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3268 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3269 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3270 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3271 *
3272 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3273 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3274 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3275 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3276 * reconfigured at resume time.
3277 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3278 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3279 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3280 * must return 1 from this function.
3281 *
3282 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3283 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3284 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3285 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3286 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3287 *
3288 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3289 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3290 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3291 * in suspend().
3292 *
3293 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3294 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3295 * and @stop must be implemented.
3296 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3297 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3298 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3299 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3300 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3301 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3302 *
3303 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3304 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3305 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3306 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3307 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3308 *
3309 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3310 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3311 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3312 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3313 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3314 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3315 * MAC address of the device going away.
3316 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3317 *
3318 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3319 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3320 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3321 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3322 *
3323 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3324 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3325 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3326 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3327 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3328 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3329 * can sleep.
3330 *
3331 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3332 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3333 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3334 *
3335 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3336 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3337 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3338 *
3339 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3340 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3341 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3342 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3343 * which flags are changed.
3344 * This callback can sleep.
3345 *
3346 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3347 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3348 *
3349 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3350 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3351 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3352 * is enabled.
3353 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3354 * The callback can sleep.
3355 *
3356 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3357 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3358 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3359 * The callback must be atomic.
3360 *
3361 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3362 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3363 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3364 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3365 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3366 *
3367 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3368 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3369 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3370 *
3371 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3372 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3373 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3374 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3375 * that power save is disabled.
3376 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3377 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3378 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3379 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3380 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3381 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3382 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3383 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3384 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3385 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3386 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3387 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3388 * The callback can sleep.
3389 *
3390 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3391 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3392 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3393 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3394 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3395 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3396 * The callback can sleep.
3397 *
3398 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3399 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3400 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3401 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3402 *
3403 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3404 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3405 *
3406 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3407 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3408 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3409 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3410 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3411 *
3412 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3413 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3414 * this notification.
3415 * The callback can sleep.
3416 *
3417 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3418 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3419 * The callback can sleep.
3420 *
3421 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3422 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3423 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3424 * The callback must be atomic.
3425 *
3426 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3427 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3428 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3429 * should be set as well.
3430 * The callback can sleep.
3431 *
3432 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3433 * The callback can sleep.
3434 *
3435 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3436 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3437 *
3438 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3439 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3440 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3441 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3442 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3443 * This callback can sleep.
3444 *
3445 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3446 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3447 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3448 * callback can sleep.
3449 *
3450 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3451 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3452 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3453 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3454 *
3455 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
3456 * power for the station.
3457 * This callback can sleep.
3458 *
3459 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3460 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3461 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3462 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3463 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3464 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3465 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3466 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3467 * The callback can sleep.
3468 *
3469 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3470 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3471 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3472 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3473 * in @sta_state.
3474 * The callback can sleep.
3475 *
3476 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3477 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3478 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3479 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3480 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3481 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3482 * Must be atomic.
3483 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3484 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3485 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3486 *
3487 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3488 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3489 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3490 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3491 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3492 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3493 * The callback can sleep.
3494 *
3495 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3496 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3497 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3498 * The callback can sleep.
3499 *
3500 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3501 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3502 * required function.
3503 * The callback can sleep.
3504 *
3505 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3506 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3507 * required function.
3508 * The callback can sleep.
3509 *
3510 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3511 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3512 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3513 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3514 * The callback can sleep.
3515 *
3516 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3517 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3518 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3519 * TSF synchronization.
3520 * The callback can sleep.
3521 *
3522 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3523 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3524 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3525 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3526 * The callback can sleep.
3527 *
3528 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3529 *
3530 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3531 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3532 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3533 * The callback can sleep.
3534 *
3535 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3536 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3537 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3538 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3539 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3540 *
3541 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3542 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3543 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3544 *
3545 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3546 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3547 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3548 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3549 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3550 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3551 * The callback can sleep.
3552 *
3553 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3554 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3555 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3556 * completion of the channel switch.
3557 *
3558 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3559 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3560 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3561 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3562 *
3563 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3564 *
3565 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3566 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3567 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3568 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3569 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3570 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3571 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3572 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3573 * must be accepted in this case.
3574 * This callback may sleep.
3575 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3576 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3577 *
3578 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3579 *
3580 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3581 *
3582 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3583 * queues before entering power save.
3584 *
3585 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3586 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3587 * The callback can sleep.
3588 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3589 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3590 * The callback must be atomic.
3591 *
3592 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3593 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3594 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3595 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3596 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3597 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3598 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3599 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3600 * more-data bit must always be set.
3601 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3602 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3603 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3604 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3605 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3606 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3607 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3608 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3609 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3610 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3611 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3612 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3613 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3614 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3615 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3616 * This callback must be atomic.
3617 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3618 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3619 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3620 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3621 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3622 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3623 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3624 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3625 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3626 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3627 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3628 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3629 * This callback must be atomic.
3630 *
3631 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3632 *
3633 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3634 *
3635 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3636 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3637 *
3638 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3639 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3640 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3641 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3642 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3643 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3644 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3645 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3646 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3647 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3648 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3649 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3650 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3651 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3652 * If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3653 * duration for which the operation is requested.
3654 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3655 *
3656 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3657 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3658 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3659 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3660 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3661 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3662 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3663 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3664 *
3665 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3666 * This callback may sleep.
3667 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3668 * This callback may sleep.
3669 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3670 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3671 * channel context with different settings
3672 * This callback may sleep.
3673 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3674 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3675 * This callback may sleep.
3676 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3677 * unbound from vif.
3678 * This callback may sleep.
3679 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3680 * another, as specified in the list of
3681 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3682 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3683 * This callback may sleep.
3684 *
3685 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3686 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3687 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3688 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3689 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3690 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3691 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3692 *
3693 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3694 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3695 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3696 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3697 * This callback may sleep.
3698 *
3699 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3700 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3701 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3702 *
3703 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3704 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3705 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3706 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3707 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3708 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3709 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3710 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3711 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3712 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3713 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3714 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3715 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3716 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3717 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3718 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3719 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3720 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3721 * when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3722 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3723 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3724 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3725 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3726 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3727 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3728 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3729 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3730 *
3731 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3732 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3733 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3734 *
3735 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3736 * and hardware limits.
3737 *
3738 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3739 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3740 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3741 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3742 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3743 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3744 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3745 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3746 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3747 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3748 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3749 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3750 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3751 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3752 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3753 * the function call.
3754 *
3755 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3756 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3757 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3758 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3759 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3760 *
3761 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3762 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3763 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3764 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3765 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3766 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3767 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3768 * changed parameters.
3769 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3770 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3771 * this call.
3772 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3773 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3774 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3775 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3776 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3777 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3778 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3779 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3780 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3781 *
3782 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3783 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3784 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
3785 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
3786 * This callback may sleep.
3787 */
3788 struct ieee80211_ops {
3789 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3790 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3791 struct sk_buff *skb);
3792 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3793 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3794 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3795 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3796 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3797 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3798 #endif
3799 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3800 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3801 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3802 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3803 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3804 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3805 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3806 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3807 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3808 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3809 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3810 u32 changed);
3811
3812 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3813 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3814
3815 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3816 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3817 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3818 unsigned int changed_flags,
3819 unsigned int *total_flags,
3820 u64 multicast);
3821 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3822 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3823 unsigned int filter_flags,
3824 unsigned int changed_flags);
3825 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3826 bool set);
3827 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3828 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3829 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3830 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3831 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3832 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3833 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3834 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3835 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3836 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3837 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3838 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3839 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3840 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3841 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3842 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3843 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3844 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3845 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3846 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3847 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3848 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3849 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3850 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3851 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3852 const u8 *mac_addr);
3853 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3854 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3855 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3856 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3857 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3858 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3859 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3860 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3861 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3862 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3863 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3864 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3865 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3866 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3867 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3868 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3869 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3870 struct dentry *dir);
3871 #endif
3872 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3873 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3874 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3875 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3876 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3877 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3878 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3879 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3880 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3881 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3882 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3883 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3884 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3885 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3886 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3887 u32 changed);
3888 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3889 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3890 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3891 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3892 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3893 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3894 struct station_info *sinfo);
3895 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3896 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3897 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3898 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3899 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3900 u64 tsf);
3901 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3902 s64 offset);
3903 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3904 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3905
3906 /**
3907 * @ampdu_action:
3908 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3909 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3910 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3911 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3912 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3913 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3914 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3915 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3916 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3917 *
3918 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3919 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3920 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3921 *
3922 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3923 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3924 *
3925 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3926 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3927 * - ``TX: 81``
3928 *
3929 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3930 *
3931 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
3932 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
3933 * if the session can start immediately.
3934 *
3935 * The callback can sleep.
3936 */
3937 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3938 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3939 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3940 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3941 struct survey_info *survey);
3942 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3943 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3944 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3945 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3946 void *data, int len);
3947 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3948 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3949 void *data, int len);
3950 #endif
3951 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3952 u32 queues, bool drop);
3953 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3954 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3955 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3956 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3957 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3958
3959 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3960 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3961 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3962 int duration,
3963 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3964 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3965 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3966 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3967 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3968 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3969 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3970 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3971 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3972 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3973 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3974 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3975
3976 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3977 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3978 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3979 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3980 bool more_data);
3981 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3983 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3984 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3985 bool more_data);
3986
3987 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3988 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3989 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3990 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3991 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3992 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3993 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3994 u32 sset, u8 *data);
3995
3996 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3997 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3998 u16 duration);
3999
4000 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4001 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4002
4003 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4004 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4005 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4006 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4007 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4008 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4009 u32 changed);
4010 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4011 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4012 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4013 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4014 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4015 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4016 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4017 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4018 int n_vifs,
4019 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4020
4021 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4022 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4023
4024 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4025 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4026 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4027 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4028 #endif
4029 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4030 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4031 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4032 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4033 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4034 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4035
4036 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4037 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4038 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4039 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4040 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4041 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4042 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4043
4044 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4045 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4046 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4047 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4048 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4049 int *dbm);
4050
4051 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4052 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4053 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4054 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4055 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4056 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4057 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4058 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4059 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4060 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4061 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4062
4063 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4064 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4065 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4066
4067 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4068 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4069 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4070 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4071 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4072 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4073 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4074 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4075 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4076 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4077 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4078 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4079 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4080 u8 instance_id);
4081 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4082 struct sk_buff *head,
4083 struct sk_buff *skb);
4084 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4085 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4086 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4087 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4088 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4089 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4090 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4091 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4092 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4093 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4094 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4095 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4096 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4097 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4098 };
4099
4100 /**
4101 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4102 *
4103 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4104 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4105 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4106 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4107 * @priv_data_len.
4108 *
4109 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4110 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4111 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4112 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4113 *
4114 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4115 */
4116 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4117 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4118 const char *requested_name);
4119
4120 /**
4121 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4122 *
4123 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4124 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4125 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4126 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4127 * @priv_data_len.
4128 *
4129 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4130 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4131 *
4132 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4133 */
4134 static inline
4135 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4136 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4137 {
4138 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4139 }
4140
4141 /**
4142 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4143 *
4144 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4145 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4146 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4147 *
4148 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4149 *
4150 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4151 */
4152 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4153
4154 /**
4155 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4156 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4157 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4158 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4159 */
4160 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4161 int throughput;
4162 int blink_time;
4163 };
4164
4165 /**
4166 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4167 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4168 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4169 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4170 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4171 */
4172 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4173 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4174 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4175 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4176 };
4177
4178 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4179 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4180 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4181 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4182 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4183 const char *
4184 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4185 unsigned int flags,
4186 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4187 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4188 #endif
4189 /**
4190 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4191 *
4192 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4193 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4194 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4195 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4196 *
4197 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4198 *
4199 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4200 */
4201 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4202 {
4203 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4204 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4205 #else
4206 return NULL;
4207 #endif
4208 }
4209
4210 /**
4211 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4212 *
4213 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4214 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4215 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4216 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4217 *
4218 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4219 *
4220 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4221 */
4222 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4223 {
4224 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4225 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4226 #else
4227 return NULL;
4228 #endif
4229 }
4230
4231 /**
4232 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4233 *
4234 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4235 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4236 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4237 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4238 *
4239 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4240 *
4241 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4242 */
4243 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4244 {
4245 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4246 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4247 #else
4248 return NULL;
4249 #endif
4250 }
4251
4252 /**
4253 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4254 *
4255 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4256 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4257 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4258 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4259 *
4260 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4261 *
4262 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4263 */
4264 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4265 {
4266 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4267 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4268 #else
4269 return NULL;
4270 #endif
4271 }
4272
4273 /**
4274 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4275 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4276 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4277 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4278 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4279 *
4280 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4281 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4282 *
4283 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4284 */
4285 static inline const char *
4286 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4287 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4288 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4289 {
4290 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4291 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4292 blink_table_len);
4293 #else
4294 return NULL;
4295 #endif
4296 }
4297
4298 /**
4299 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4300 *
4301 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4302 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4303 *
4304 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4305 */
4306 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4307
4308 /**
4309 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4310 *
4311 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4312 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4313 * before calling this function.
4314 *
4315 * @hw: the hardware to free
4316 */
4317 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4318
4319 /**
4320 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4321 *
4322 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4323 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4324 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4325 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4326 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4327 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4328 *
4329 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4330 */
4331 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4332
4333 /**
4334 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4335 *
4336 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4337 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4338 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4339 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4340 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4341 *
4342 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4343 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4344 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4345 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4346 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4347 *
4348 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4349 *
4350 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4351 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4352 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4353 * @napi: the NAPI context
4354 */
4355 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4356 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4357
4358 /**
4359 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4360 *
4361 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4362 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4363 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4364 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4365 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4366 *
4367 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4368 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4369 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4370 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4371 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4372 *
4373 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4374 *
4375 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4376 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4377 */
4378 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4379 {
4380 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4381 }
4382
4383 /**
4384 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4385 *
4386 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4387 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4388 *
4389 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4390 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4391 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4392 *
4393 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4394 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4395 */
4396 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4397
4398 /**
4399 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4400 *
4401 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4402 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4403 *
4404 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4405 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4406 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4407 *
4408 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4409 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4410 */
4411 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4412 struct sk_buff *skb)
4413 {
4414 local_bh_disable();
4415 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4416 local_bh_enable();
4417 }
4418
4419 /**
4420 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4421 *
4422 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4423 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4424 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4425 *
4426 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4427 *
4428 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4429 * each other.
4430 *
4431 * @sta: currently connected sta
4432 * @start: start or stop PS
4433 *
4434 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4435 */
4436 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4437
4438 /**
4439 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4440 * (in process context)
4441 *
4442 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4443 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4444 * applies.
4445 *
4446 * @sta: currently connected sta
4447 * @start: start or stop PS
4448 *
4449 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4450 */
4451 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4452 bool start)
4453 {
4454 int ret;
4455
4456 local_bh_disable();
4457 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4458 local_bh_enable();
4459
4460 return ret;
4461 }
4462
4463 /**
4464 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4465 * @sta: currently connected station
4466 *
4467 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4468 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4469 * connected station was received.
4470 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4471 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4472 * be serialized.
4473 */
4474 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4475
4476 /**
4477 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4478 * @sta: currently connected station
4479 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4480 *
4481 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4482 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4483 * from a connected station was received.
4484 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4485 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4486 * serialized.
4487 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4488 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4489 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4490 * checks.
4491 */
4492 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4493
4494 /*
4495 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4496 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4497 */
4498 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
4499
4500 /**
4501 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4502 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4503 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4504 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4505 *
4506 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4507 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4508 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4509 *
4510 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4511 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4512 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4513 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4514 *
4515 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4516 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4517 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4518 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4519 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4520 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4521 *
4522 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4523 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4524 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4525 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4526 * use this API.
4527 */
4528 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4529 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4530
4531 /**
4532 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4533 *
4534 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4535 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4536 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4537 *
4538 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4539 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4540 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4541 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4542 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4543 */
4544 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4545 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4546 struct sk_buff *skb,
4547 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4548 int max_rates);
4549
4550 /**
4551 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4552 *
4553 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4554 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4555 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4556 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4557 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4558 * slow stations to starve).
4559 *
4560 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4561 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4562 */
4563 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4564 u32 thr);
4565
4566 /**
4567 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4568 *
4569 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4570 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4571 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4572 *
4573 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4574 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4575 * @info: tx status information
4576 */
4577 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4578 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4579 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4580
4581 /**
4582 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4583 *
4584 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4585 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4586 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4587 *
4588 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4589 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4590 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4591 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4592 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4593 *
4594 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4595 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4596 */
4597 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4598 struct sk_buff *skb);
4599
4600 /**
4601 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4602 *
4603 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4604 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4605 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4606 *
4607 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4608 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4609 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4610 *
4611 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4612 * @status: tx status information
4613 */
4614 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4615 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4616
4617 /**
4618 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4619 *
4620 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4621 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4622 * specific skbs.
4623 *
4624 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4625 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4626 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4627 *
4628 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4629 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4630 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4631 * @info: tx status information
4632 */
4633 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4634 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4635 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4636 {
4637 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4638 .sta = sta,
4639 .info = info,
4640 };
4641
4642 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4643 }
4644
4645 /**
4646 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4647 *
4648 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4649 *
4650 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4651 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4652 * for a single hardware.
4653 *
4654 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4655 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4656 */
4657 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4658 struct sk_buff *skb)
4659 {
4660 local_bh_disable();
4661 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4662 local_bh_enable();
4663 }
4664
4665 /**
4666 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4667 *
4668 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4669 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4670 *
4671 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4672 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4673 *
4674 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4675 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4676 */
4677 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4678 struct sk_buff *skb);
4679
4680 /**
4681 * ieee80211_tx_status_8023 - transmit status callback for 802.3 frame format
4682 *
4683 * Call this function for all transmitted data frames after their transmit
4684 * completion. This callback should only be called for data frames which
4685 * are are using driver's (or hardware's) offload capability of encap/decap
4686 * 802.11 frames.
4687 *
4688 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4689 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other and all
4690 * calls in the same tx status family.
4691 *
4692 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4693 * @vif: the interface for which the frame was transmitted
4694 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4695 */
4696 void ieee80211_tx_status_8023(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4697 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4698 struct sk_buff *skb);
4699
4700 /**
4701 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4702 *
4703 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4704 * connected STA.
4705 *
4706 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4707 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4708 */
4709 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4710
4711 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4712
4713 /**
4714 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4715 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4716 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4717 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4718 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4719 * should be ignored.
4720 */
4721 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4722 u16 tim_offset;
4723 u16 tim_length;
4724
4725 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4726 };
4727
4728 /**
4729 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4730 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4731 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4732 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4733 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4734 *
4735 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4736 * obtain the beacon template.
4737 *
4738 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4739 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4740 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4741 * applicable, the CSA count.
4742 *
4743 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4744 *
4745 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4746 */
4747 struct sk_buff *
4748 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4749 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4750 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4751
4752 /**
4753 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4754 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4755 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4756 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4757 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4758 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4759 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4760 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4761 *
4762 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4763 * obtain the beacon frame.
4764 *
4765 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4766 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4767 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4768 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4769 *
4770 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4771 *
4772 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4773 */
4774 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4775 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4776 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4777
4778 /**
4779 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4780 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4781 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4782 *
4783 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4784 *
4785 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4786 */
4787 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4788 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4789 {
4790 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4791 }
4792
4793 /**
4794 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4795 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4796 *
4797 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4798 * This function is called implicitly when
4799 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4800 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4801 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4802 *
4803 * Return: new csa counter value
4804 */
4805 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4806
4807 /**
4808 * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4809 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4810 * @counter: the new value for the counter
4811 *
4812 * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4813 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4814 *
4815 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4816 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4817 */
4818 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4819
4820 /**
4821 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4822 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4823 *
4824 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4825 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4826 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4827 */
4828 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4829
4830 /**
4831 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4832 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4833 *
4834 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4835 */
4836 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4837
4838
4839 /**
4840 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4841 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4842 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4843 *
4844 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4845 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4846 *
4847 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4848 *
4849 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4850 */
4851 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4852 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4853
4854 /**
4855 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4856 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4857 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4858 *
4859 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4860 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4861 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4862 *
4863 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4864 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4865 *
4866 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4867 */
4868 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4869 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4870
4871 /**
4872 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4873 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4874 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4875 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4876 * if at all possible
4877 *
4878 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4879 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4880 * BSSID and address is used.
4881 *
4882 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4883 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4884 *
4885 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4886 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4887 *
4888 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4889 */
4890 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4891 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4892 bool qos_ok);
4893
4894 /**
4895 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4896 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4897 * @src_addr: source MAC address
4898 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4899 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4900 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4901 *
4902 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4903 * hardware.
4904 *
4905 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4906 */
4907 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4908 const u8 *src_addr,
4909 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4910 size_t tailroom);
4911
4912 /**
4913 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4914 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4915 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4916 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4917 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4918 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4919 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4920 *
4921 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4922 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4923 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4924 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4925 */
4926 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4927 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4928 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4929 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4930
4931 /**
4932 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4933 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4934 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4935 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4936 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4937 *
4938 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4939 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4940 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4941 *
4942 * Return: The duration.
4943 */
4944 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4945 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4946 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4947
4948 /**
4949 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4950 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4951 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4952 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4953 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4954 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4955 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4956 *
4957 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4958 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4959 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4960 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4961 */
4962 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4963 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4964 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4965 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4966 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4967
4968 /**
4969 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4970 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4971 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4972 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4973 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4974 *
4975 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4976 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4977 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4978 *
4979 * Return: The duration.
4980 */
4981 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4982 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4983 size_t frame_len,
4984 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4985
4986 /**
4987 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4988 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4989 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4990 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4991 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4992 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4993 *
4994 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4995 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4996 *
4997 * Return: The duration.
4998 */
4999 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5000 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5001 enum nl80211_band band,
5002 size_t frame_len,
5003 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5004
5005 /**
5006 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5007 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5008 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5009 *
5010 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5011 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5012 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5013 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5014 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5015 *
5016 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5017 * frames are available.
5018 *
5019 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5020 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5021 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5022 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5023 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5024 * use common code for all beacons.
5025 */
5026 struct sk_buff *
5027 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5028
5029 /**
5030 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5031 *
5032 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5033 *
5034 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5035 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5036 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5037 */
5038 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5039 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5040
5041 /**
5042 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5043 *
5044 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5045 * from the given packet.
5046 *
5047 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5048 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5049 * with this P1K
5050 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5051 */
5052 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5053 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5054 {
5055 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5056 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5057 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5058
5059 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5060 }
5061
5062 /**
5063 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5064 *
5065 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5066 * and transmitter address.
5067 *
5068 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5069 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5070 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5071 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5072 */
5073 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5074 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5075
5076 /**
5077 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5078 *
5079 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5080 * in the packet.
5081 *
5082 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5083 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5084 * encrypted with this key
5085 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5086 */
5087 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5088 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5089
5090 /**
5091 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5092 *
5093 * @pos: start of crypto header
5094 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5095 * @pn: PN to add
5096 *
5097 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5098 * the packet payload)
5099 *
5100 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5101 * point to the crypto header)
5102 */
5103 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5104
5105 /**
5106 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5107 *
5108 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5109 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5110 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5111 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5112 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5113 *
5114 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5115 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5116 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5117 *
5118 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5119 * can be done concurrently.
5120 */
5121 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5122 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5123
5124 /**
5125 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5126 *
5127 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5128 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5129 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5130 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5131 * @seq: new sequence data
5132 *
5133 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5134 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5135 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5136 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5137 *
5138 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5139 * can be done concurrently.
5140 */
5141 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5142 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5143
5144 /**
5145 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5146 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5147 *
5148 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5149 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5150 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5151 *
5152 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5153 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5154 */
5155 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5156
5157 /**
5158 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5159 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5160 * @keyconf: new key data
5161 *
5162 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5163 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5164 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5165 *
5166 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5167 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5168 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5169 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5170 *
5171 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5172 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5173 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5174 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5175 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5176 * of the reconfiguration.
5177 *
5178 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5179 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5180 *
5181 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5182 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5183 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5184 * the key that's being replaced.
5185 */
5186 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5187 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5188 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5189
5190 /**
5191 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5192 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5193 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5194 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5195 * @gfp: allocation flags
5196 */
5197 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5198 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5199
5200 /**
5201 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5202 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5203 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5204 *
5205 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5206 */
5207 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5208
5209 /**
5210 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5211 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5212 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5213 *
5214 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5215 */
5216 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5217
5218 /**
5219 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5220 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5221 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5222 *
5223 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5224 *
5225 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5226 */
5227
5228 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5229
5230 /**
5231 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5232 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5233 *
5234 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5235 */
5236 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5237
5238 /**
5239 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5240 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5241 *
5242 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5243 */
5244 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5245
5246 /**
5247 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5248 *
5249 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5250 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5251 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5252 * any context, including hardirq context.
5253 *
5254 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5255 * @info: information about the completed scan
5256 */
5257 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5258 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5259
5260 /**
5261 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5262 *
5263 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5264 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5265 *
5266 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5267 */
5268 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5269
5270 /**
5271 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5272 *
5273 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5274 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5275 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5276 * while associating, for instance.
5277 *
5278 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5279 */
5280 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5281
5282 /**
5283 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5284 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5285 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5286 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5287 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5288 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5289 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5290 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5291 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5292 */
5293 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5294 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
5295 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
5296 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
5297 };
5298
5299 /**
5300 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5301 *
5302 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5303 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5304 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5305 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5306 *
5307 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5308 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5309 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5310 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5311 */
5312 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5313 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5314 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5315 void *data);
5316
5317 /**
5318 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5319 *
5320 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5321 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5322 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5323 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5324 * be used.
5325 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5326 *
5327 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5328 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5329 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5330 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5331 */
5332 static inline void
5333 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5334 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5335 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5336 void *data)
5337 {
5338 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5339 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5340 iterator, data);
5341 }
5342
5343 /**
5344 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5345 *
5346 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5347 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5348 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5349 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5350 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5351 *
5352 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5353 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5354 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5355 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5356 */
5357 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5358 u32 iter_flags,
5359 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5360 u8 *mac,
5361 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5362 void *data);
5363
5364 /**
5365 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5366 *
5367 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5368 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5369 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5370 *
5371 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5372 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5373 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5374 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5375 */
5376 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5377 u32 iter_flags,
5378 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5379 u8 *mac,
5380 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5381 void *data);
5382
5383 /**
5384 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5385 *
5386 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5387 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5388 * function for them.
5389 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5390 *
5391 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5392 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5393 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5394 */
5395 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5396 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5397 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5398 void *data);
5399 /**
5400 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5401 *
5402 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5403 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5404 *
5405 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5406 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5407 */
5408 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5409
5410 /**
5411 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5412 *
5413 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5414 * workqueue.
5415 *
5416 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5417 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5418 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5419 */
5420 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5421 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5422 unsigned long delay);
5423
5424 /**
5425 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5426 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5427 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5428 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5429 *
5430 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5431 *
5432 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5433 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5434 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5435 */
5436 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5437 u16 timeout);
5438
5439 /**
5440 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5441 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5442 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5443 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5444 *
5445 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5446 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5447 * from any context.
5448 */
5449 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5450 u16 tid);
5451
5452 /**
5453 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5454 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5455 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5456 *
5457 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5458 *
5459 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5460 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5461 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5462 */
5463 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5464
5465 /**
5466 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5467 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5468 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5469 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5470 *
5471 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5472 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5473 * can be called from any context.
5474 */
5475 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5476 u16 tid);
5477
5478 /**
5479 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5480 *
5481 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5482 * @addr: station's address
5483 *
5484 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5485 *
5486 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5487 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5488 */
5489 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5490 const u8 *addr);
5491
5492 /**
5493 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5494 *
5495 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5496 * @addr: remote station's address
5497 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5498 *
5499 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5500 *
5501 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5502 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5503 *
5504 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5505 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5506 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5507 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5508 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5509 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5510 * is not reliable.
5511 *
5512 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5513 */
5514 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5515 const u8 *addr,
5516 const u8 *localaddr);
5517
5518 /**
5519 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5520 * @hw: the hardware
5521 * @pubsta: the station
5522 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5523 *
5524 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5525 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5526 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5527 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5528 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5529 *
5530 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5531 * manner.
5532 *
5533 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5534 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5535 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5536 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5537 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5538 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5539 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5540 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5541 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5542 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5543 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5544 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5545 * woke up while blocked or not.
5546 */
5547 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5548 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5549
5550 /**
5551 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5552 * @pubsta: the station
5553 *
5554 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5555 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5556 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5557 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5558 *
5559 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5560 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5561 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5562 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5563 *
5564 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5565 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5566 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5567 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
5568 */
5569 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5570
5571 /**
5572 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5573 * @pubsta: the station
5574 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5575 *
5576 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5577 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5578 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5579 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5580 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5581 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5582 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5583 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5584 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5585 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5586 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5587 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5588 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5589 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5590 */
5591 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5592
5593 /**
5594 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5595 *
5596 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5597 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5598 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5599 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5600 *
5601 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5602 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5603 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5604 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5605 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5606 * attempts.
5607 *
5608 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5609 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5610 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5611 * them to 0.
5612 *
5613 * @pubsta: the station
5614 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5615 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5616 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5617 */
5618 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5619 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5620
5621 /**
5622 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
5623 *
5624 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5625 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5626 *
5627 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
5628 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
5629 */
5630 bool
5631 ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5632
5633 /**
5634 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5635 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5636 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5637 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5638 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5639 *
5640 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5641 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5642 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5643 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5644 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5645 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5646 *
5647 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5648 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5649 * set_key callback.
5650 */
5651 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5652 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5653 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5654 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5655 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5656 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5657 void *data),
5658 void *iter_data);
5659
5660 /**
5661 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5662 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5663 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5664 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5665 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5666 *
5667 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5668 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5669 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5670 * in removal process will be skipped.
5671 *
5672 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5673 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5674 */
5675 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5676 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5677 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5678 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5679 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5680 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5681 void *data),
5682 void *iter_data);
5683
5684 /**
5685 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5686 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5687 * @iter: iterator function
5688 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5689 *
5690 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5691 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5692 * places while calling into the driver.
5693 *
5694 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5695 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5696 * removed.
5697 *
5698 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5699 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5700 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5701 * or not.
5702 */
5703 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5704 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5705 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5706 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5707 void *data),
5708 void *iter_data);
5709
5710 /**
5711 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5712 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5713 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5714 *
5715 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5716 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5717 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5718 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5719 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5720 * %NULL.
5721 *
5722 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5723 */
5724 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5725 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5726
5727 /**
5728 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5729 *
5730 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5731 *
5732 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5733 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5734 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5735 */
5736 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5737
5738 /**
5739 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5740 *
5741 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5742 *
5743 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5744 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5745 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5746 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5747 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5748 *
5749 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5750 * without connection recovery attempts.
5751 */
5752 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5753
5754 /**
5755 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5756 *
5757 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5758 *
5759 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5760 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5761 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5762 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5763 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5764 *
5765 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5766 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5767 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5768 * disconnect normally later.
5769 *
5770 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5771 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5772 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5773 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5774 */
5775 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5776
5777 /**
5778 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5779 * rssi threshold triggered
5780 *
5781 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5782 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5783 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5784 * @gfp: context flags
5785 *
5786 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5787 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5788 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5789 */
5790 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5791 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5792 s32 rssi_level,
5793 gfp_t gfp);
5794
5795 /**
5796 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5797 *
5798 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5799 * @gfp: context flags
5800 */
5801 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5802
5803 /**
5804 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5805 *
5806 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5807 */
5808 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5809
5810 /**
5811 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5812 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5813 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5814 *
5815 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5816 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5817 */
5818 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5819
5820 /**
5821 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5822 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5823 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5824 *
5825 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5826 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5827 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5828 */
5829 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5830 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5831
5832 /**
5833 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5834 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5835 */
5836 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5837
5838 /**
5839 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5840 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5841 */
5842 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5843
5844 /**
5845 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5846 *
5847 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5848 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5849 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5850 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5851 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5852 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5853 *
5854 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5855 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5856 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5857 */
5858 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5859 const u8 *addr);
5860
5861 /**
5862 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5863 * @pubsta: station struct
5864 * @tid: the session's TID
5865 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5866 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5867 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5868 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5869 *
5870 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5871 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5872 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5873 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5874 */
5875 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5876 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5877 u16 received_mpdus);
5878
5879 /**
5880 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5881 *
5882 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5883 * buffer.
5884 *
5885 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5886 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5887 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5888 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5889 */
5890 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5891
5892 /**
5893 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5894 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5895 * @addr: station mac address
5896 * @tid: the rx tid
5897 */
5898 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5899 unsigned int tid);
5900
5901 /**
5902 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5903 *
5904 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5905 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5906 * reordering.
5907 *
5908 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5909 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5910 *
5911 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5912 * @addr: station mac address
5913 * @tid: the rx tid
5914 */
5915 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5916 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5917 {
5918 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5919 return;
5920 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5921 }
5922
5923 /**
5924 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5925 *
5926 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5927 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5928 * reordering.
5929 *
5930 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5931 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5932 *
5933 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5934 * @addr: station mac address
5935 * @tid: the rx tid
5936 */
5937 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5938 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5939 {
5940 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5941 return;
5942 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5943 }
5944
5945 /**
5946 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5947 *
5948 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5949 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5950 *
5951 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5952 *
5953 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5954 * @addr: station mac address
5955 * @tid: the rx tid
5956 */
5957 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5958 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5959
5960 /* Rate control API */
5961
5962 /**
5963 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5964 *
5965 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5966 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5967 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5968 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5969 * to be filled in
5970 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5971 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5972 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5973 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5974 * RTS threshold
5975 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5976 * if the selected rate supports it
5977 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5978 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5979 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5980 */
5981 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5982 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5983 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5984 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5985 struct sk_buff *skb;
5986 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5987 bool rts, short_preamble;
5988 u32 rate_idx_mask;
5989 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5990 bool bss;
5991 };
5992
5993 /**
5994 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5995 */
5996 enum rate_control_capabilities {
5997 /**
5998 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5999 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6000 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6001 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6002 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6003 */
6004 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6005 };
6006
6007 struct rate_control_ops {
6008 unsigned long capa;
6009 const char *name;
6010 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6011 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6012 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6013 void (*free)(void *priv);
6014
6015 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6016 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6017 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6018 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6019 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6020 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6021 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6022 u32 changed);
6023 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6024 void *priv_sta);
6025
6026 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6027 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6028 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6029 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6030 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6031 struct sk_buff *skb);
6032 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6033 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6034
6035 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6036 struct dentry *dir);
6037
6038 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6039 };
6040
6041 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6042 enum nl80211_band band,
6043 int index)
6044 {
6045 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6046 }
6047
6048 static inline s8
6049 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6050 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6051 {
6052 int i;
6053
6054 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6055 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6056 return i;
6057
6058 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6059 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6060
6061 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6062 return 0;
6063 }
6064
6065 static inline
6066 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6067 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6068 {
6069 unsigned int i;
6070
6071 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6072 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6073 return true;
6074 return false;
6075 }
6076
6077 /**
6078 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6079 *
6080 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6081 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6082 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6083 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6084 *
6085 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6086 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6087 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6088 */
6089 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6090 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6091 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6092
6093 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6094 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6095
6096 static inline bool
6097 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6098 {
6099 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6100 }
6101
6102 static inline bool
6103 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6104 {
6105 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6106 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6107 }
6108
6109 static inline bool
6110 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6111 {
6112 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6113 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6114 }
6115
6116 static inline bool
6117 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6118 {
6119 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6120 }
6121
6122 static inline bool
6123 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6124 {
6125 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6126 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6127 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6128 }
6129
6130 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6131 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6132 {
6133 if (p2p) {
6134 switch (type) {
6135 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6136 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6137 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6138 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6139 default:
6140 break;
6141 }
6142 }
6143 return type;
6144 }
6145
6146 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
6147 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6148 {
6149 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6150 }
6151
6152 /**
6153 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6154 *
6155 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6156 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6157 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6158 *
6159 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6160 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6161 * matching GroupId management frame.
6162 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6163 */
6164 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6165 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6166
6167 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6168 int rssi_min_thold,
6169 int rssi_max_thold);
6170
6171 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6172
6173 /**
6174 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6175 *
6176 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6177 *
6178 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6179 *
6180 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6181 * applicable.
6182 */
6183 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6184
6185 /**
6186 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6187 * @vif: virtual interface
6188 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6189 * @gfp: allocation flags
6190 *
6191 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6192 */
6193 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6194 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6195 gfp_t gfp);
6196
6197 /**
6198 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6199 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6200 * @vif: virtual interface
6201 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6202 * @band: the band to transmit on
6203 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6204 *
6205 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6206 */
6207 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6208 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6209 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6210
6211 /**
6212 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6213 *
6214 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6215 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6216 *
6217 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6218 *
6219 * private:
6220 *
6221 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6222 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6223 */
6224 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6225 u32 next_tsf;
6226 bool has_next_tsf;
6227
6228 u8 absent;
6229
6230 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6231 struct {
6232 u32 start;
6233 u32 duration;
6234 u32 interval;
6235 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6236 };
6237
6238 /**
6239 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6240 *
6241 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6242 * @data: NoA tracking data
6243 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6244 *
6245 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6246 */
6247 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6248 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6249
6250 /**
6251 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6252 *
6253 * @data: NoA tracking data
6254 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6255 */
6256 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6257
6258 /**
6259 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6260 * @vif: virtual interface
6261 * @peer: the peer's destination address
6262 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6263 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6264 * @gfp: allocation flags
6265 *
6266 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6267 */
6268 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6269 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6270 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6271
6272 /**
6273 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6274 *
6275 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6276 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6277 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6278 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6279 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6280 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6281 *
6282 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6283 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6284 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6285 *
6286 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6287 * @tid: the TID to reserve
6288 *
6289 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6290 */
6291 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6292
6293 /**
6294 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6295 *
6296 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6297 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6298 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6299 *
6300 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6301 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6302 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6303 *
6304 * @sta: the station
6305 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6306 */
6307 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6308
6309 /**
6310 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6311 *
6312 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6313 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6314 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6315 *
6316 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6317 *
6318 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6319 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6320 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6321 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6322 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6323 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6324 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6325 *
6326 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6327 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6328 */
6329 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6330 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6331
6332 /**
6333 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6334 * (in process context)
6335 *
6336 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6337 * (internally disables bottom halves).
6338 *
6339 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6340 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6341 * ieee80211_next_txq()
6342 */
6343 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6344 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6345 {
6346 struct sk_buff *skb;
6347
6348 local_bh_disable();
6349 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6350 local_bh_enable();
6351
6352 return skb;
6353 }
6354
6355 /**
6356 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6357 *
6358 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6359 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6360 *
6361 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6362 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6363 * driver has finished scheduling it.
6364 */
6365 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6366
6367 /**
6368 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6369 *
6370 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6371 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6372 *
6373 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6374 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6375 */
6376 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6377
6378 /* (deprecated) */
6379 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6380 {
6381 }
6382
6383 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6384 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6385
6386 /**
6387 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6388 *
6389 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6390 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6391 *
6392 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6393 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6394 *
6395 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6396 * this TXQ internally.
6397 */
6398 static inline void
6399 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6400 {
6401 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6402 }
6403
6404 /**
6405 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6406 *
6407 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6408 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6409 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6410 *
6411 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6412 * internally.
6413 */
6414 static inline void
6415 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6416 bool force)
6417 {
6418 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6419 }
6420
6421 /**
6422 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6423 *
6424 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6425 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6426 * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6427 * next_txq().
6428 *
6429 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6430 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6431 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6432 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6433 * again.
6434 *
6435 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6436 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6437 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6438 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6439 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6440 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6441 *
6442 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6443 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6444 */
6445 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6446 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6447
6448 /**
6449 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6450 *
6451 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6452 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6453 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6454 *
6455 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6456 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6457 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6458 */
6459 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6460 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6461 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6462
6463 /**
6464 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6465 *
6466 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6467 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6468 *
6469 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6470 * @inst_id: the local instance id
6471 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6472 * @gfp: allocation flags
6473 */
6474 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6475 u8 inst_id,
6476 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6477 gfp_t gfp);
6478
6479 /**
6480 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6481 *
6482 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6483 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6484 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6485 *
6486 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6487 * @match: match event information
6488 * @gfp: allocation flags
6489 */
6490 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6491 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6492 gfp_t gfp);
6493
6494 /**
6495 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
6496 *
6497 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6498 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
6499 *
6500 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6501 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
6502 * information.
6503 * @len: frame length in bytes
6504 */
6505 u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6506 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
6507 int len);
6508
6509 /**
6510 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
6511 *
6512 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
6513 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
6514 *
6515 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6516 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
6517 * @len: frame length in bytes
6518 */
6519 u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6520 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
6521 int len);
6522 /**
6523 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
6524 *
6525 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
6526 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
6527 * hardware or firmware.
6528 *
6529 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6530 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
6531 */
6532 bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
6533
6534 #endif /* MAC80211_H */